1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2023 Intel Corporation
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the
93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between
94 * different stations/interfaces.
96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either
97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly.
108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue
110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling
111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will
112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation.
114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
118 * ieee80211_return_txq().
120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
124 * .release_buffered_frames().
125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
131 * DOC: HW timestamping
133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
154 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
232 * @def: the channel definition
233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
258 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
266 * for changes/removal.)
268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
300 * also implies a change in the AID.
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
310 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
329 * context had been assigned.
330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
333 * keep alive) changed.
334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
343 * @BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING: The channel puncturing bitmap changed.
344 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed.
346 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
347 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
350 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
351 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
352 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
353 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
354 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
356 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
357 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
358 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
359 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
360 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
361 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
362 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
363 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
364 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
365 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
366 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
367 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
368 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
369 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
370 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
371 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
372 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
373 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
374 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
376 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
377 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
378 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
379 BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING = BIT_ULL(32),
380 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33),
382 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
386 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
387 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
388 * filtering will be disabled.
390 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
393 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
394 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
395 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
396 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
397 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
398 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
399 * once each time the timeout triggers.
401 enum ieee80211_event_type {
409 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
410 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
411 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
413 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
419 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
420 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
422 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
423 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
427 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
428 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
429 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
430 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
431 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
433 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
441 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
442 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
443 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
444 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
446 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
453 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
454 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
455 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
456 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
458 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
459 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
460 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
465 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
466 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
468 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
470 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
477 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
478 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
479 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
480 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
481 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
482 * @u:union holding the fields above
484 struct ieee80211_event {
485 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
487 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
488 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
489 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
494 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
496 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
498 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
499 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
501 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
502 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
503 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
507 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
509 * @lci: LCI subelement content
510 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
511 * @lci_len: LCI data length
512 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
514 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
522 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
523 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
525 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
526 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
528 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
534 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
536 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
537 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
539 * @vif: reference to owning VIF
540 * @addr: (link) address used locally
541 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
542 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
543 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
544 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
546 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
547 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
548 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
549 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
550 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
551 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
552 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
553 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
554 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
555 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
556 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
557 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
558 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
559 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
560 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
561 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
562 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
563 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
564 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
565 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
566 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
567 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
568 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
569 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
570 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
571 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
572 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
573 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
574 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
575 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
576 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
577 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
578 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
579 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
580 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
582 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
583 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
584 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
585 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
586 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
587 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
588 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
589 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
590 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
591 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
592 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
593 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
594 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
595 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
596 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
597 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
598 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
599 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
600 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
601 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
602 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
603 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
604 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
605 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
606 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
607 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
608 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
609 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
610 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
611 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
612 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
613 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
614 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
615 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
616 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
617 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
618 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
619 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
620 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
622 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
623 * responder functionality.
624 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
625 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
626 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
627 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
628 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
629 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
630 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
631 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
632 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
633 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
635 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
636 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
637 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
638 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
640 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
641 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
642 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
643 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
644 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
645 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
646 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
647 * @eht_puncturing: bitmap to indicate which channels are punctured in this BSS
648 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on.
649 * @csa_punct_bitmap: new puncturing bitmap for channel switch
650 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
651 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
652 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
653 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
654 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
655 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
656 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing.
657 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
658 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability.
659 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability.
660 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability.
661 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU
663 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU
665 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU
667 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU
669 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU
671 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU
673 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU
675 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission
676 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU
678 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU
680 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU
682 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU
685 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
689 unsigned int link_id;
690 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
691 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
694 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
700 /* erp related data */
702 bool use_short_preamble;
707 u16 assoc_capability;
712 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
713 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
714 u16 ht_operation_mode;
719 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
720 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
724 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
725 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
726 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
728 bool protected_keep_alive;
730 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
731 /* Multiple BSSID data */
733 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
737 u8 profile_periodicity;
742 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
743 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
744 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
745 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
746 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
747 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
748 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
755 u16 csa_punct_bitmap;
758 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
760 bool color_change_active;
761 u8 color_change_color;
766 bool vht_su_beamformer;
767 bool vht_su_beamformee;
768 bool vht_mu_beamformer;
769 bool vht_mu_beamformee;
770 bool he_su_beamformer;
771 bool he_su_beamformee;
772 bool he_mu_beamformer;
773 bool he_full_ul_mumimo;
774 bool eht_su_beamformer;
775 bool eht_su_beamformee;
776 bool eht_mu_beamformer;
780 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
782 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
786 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
787 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
788 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
789 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
790 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
791 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
792 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
793 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
794 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
795 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
801 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
803 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
804 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
805 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
806 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
807 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
808 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
809 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
810 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
812 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
813 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
814 * is for the whole aggregation.
815 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
816 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
818 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
819 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
821 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
822 * off-channel operation.
823 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
824 * (header conversion)
825 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
826 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
827 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
828 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
829 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
830 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
831 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
832 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
833 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
834 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
836 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
837 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
838 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
839 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
840 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
841 * should kick the MLME state machine.
842 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
843 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
844 * status to user space)
845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
847 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
849 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
850 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
851 * handled properly by the device.
852 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
853 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
854 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
856 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
857 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
858 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
859 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
860 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
861 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
863 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
864 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
865 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
866 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
867 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
868 * monitor injection).
869 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
870 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
871 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
872 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
873 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
875 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
876 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
878 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
879 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
880 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
884 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
885 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
887 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
888 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
889 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
890 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
891 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
892 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
893 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
894 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
895 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
896 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
897 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
898 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
899 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
900 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
901 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
902 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
903 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
904 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
905 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
906 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
907 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
908 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
909 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
914 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
917 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
919 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
920 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
922 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
924 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
925 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
926 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
927 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
928 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
929 * it can be sent out.
930 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
931 * has already been assigned to this frame.
932 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
933 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
934 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
935 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
936 * for sequence number assignment
937 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
938 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
939 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
940 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
941 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
942 * it's intended for an MLD.
944 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
946 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
947 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
948 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
949 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
950 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
951 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
952 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
953 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
954 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
955 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
956 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9),
957 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000,
960 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf
961 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \
962 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
963 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
966 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
968 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
970 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
972 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
973 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
977 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
978 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
980 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
981 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
982 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
983 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
984 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
985 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
986 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
987 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
990 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
991 * Rate Control algorithm.
993 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
994 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
996 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
997 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
998 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
999 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
1002 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
1003 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
1006 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
1008 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
1009 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
1010 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
1011 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
1014 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
1015 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
1016 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
1017 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
1019 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
1020 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
1021 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
1022 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
1023 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
1024 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
1025 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
1026 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
1027 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
1031 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
1032 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
1034 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
1035 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
1037 /* maximum number of rate stages */
1038 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
1040 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
1041 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
1044 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
1046 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
1047 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
1048 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1050 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1051 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1053 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1054 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1056 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1057 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1058 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1059 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1062 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1064 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1065 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1066 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1067 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1068 * information should then contain::
1070 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1072 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1073 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1075 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1081 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
1083 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1085 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0;
1088 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1091 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1092 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1093 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1097 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1099 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1103 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1105 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1109 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1111 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1112 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1113 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1114 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1116 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1117 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1118 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1119 * link the frame will be transmitted on
1120 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1121 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately,
1122 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation
1123 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame
1124 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1125 * @control: union part for control data
1126 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1127 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1128 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1129 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1130 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1131 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1132 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1133 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1134 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1135 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1136 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1137 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1139 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1140 * @status: union part for status data
1141 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1142 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1143 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1144 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1145 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1146 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1147 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1148 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1149 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1150 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1151 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1152 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1153 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1154 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1155 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1156 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1157 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1159 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1160 /* common information */
1174 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1175 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1176 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1179 u8 short_preamble:1;
1182 /* for injection only (bitmap) */
1187 /* only needed before rate control */
1188 unsigned long jiffies;
1190 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1192 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1194 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1200 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1209 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)];
1212 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1213 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1216 void *rate_driver_data[
1217 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1220 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1225 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1227 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1228 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1230 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1231 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1235 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1237 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1241 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1243 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1244 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1246 * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1247 * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1248 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1249 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1250 * that was used when sending the packet.
1252 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1253 struct rate_info rate_idx;
1259 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1261 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1262 * @info: Basic tx status information
1263 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1264 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1265 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1266 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1267 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1268 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1269 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1271 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1273 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1274 struct sk_buff *skb;
1275 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1276 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1279 struct list_head *free_list;
1283 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1285 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1286 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1287 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1289 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1290 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1291 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1292 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1294 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1295 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1296 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1297 const u8 *common_ies;
1298 size_t common_ie_len;
1302 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1304 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1307 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1309 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1313 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1315 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1317 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1318 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1319 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1320 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1322 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1323 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1324 * any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1327 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1331 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1332 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1333 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1334 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1335 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1336 /* clear the rate counts */
1337 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1338 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1339 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1344 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1346 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1347 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1348 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1349 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1350 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1351 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1352 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1353 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1354 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1355 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1356 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1357 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1358 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1359 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1360 * de-duplication by itself.
1361 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1363 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1365 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1366 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1367 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1369 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1370 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1371 * (including FCS) was received.
1372 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1373 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1374 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1375 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1376 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1377 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1379 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1380 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1381 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1382 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1384 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1385 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1386 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1387 * done by the hardware
1388 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1389 * processing it in any regular way.
1390 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1391 * them for sniffing purposes.
1392 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1393 * monitor interfaces.
1394 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1395 * them for sniffing purposes.
1396 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1397 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1398 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1399 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1400 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1401 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1402 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1403 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1404 * interleaved with other frames.
1405 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the
1406 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header).
1407 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point
1408 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV
1409 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs
1411 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1412 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1413 * the first subframe.
1414 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1415 * be done in the hardware.
1416 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1418 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1419 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1420 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1426 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1430 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1431 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1432 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1433 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1434 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1435 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1436 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1437 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1438 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1439 * hardware or driver)
1441 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1442 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1443 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1444 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1445 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1446 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1447 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1448 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1449 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1450 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1451 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1452 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1453 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1454 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1455 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1456 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1457 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1458 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1459 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1460 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1461 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1462 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20),
1463 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1464 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1465 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1466 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1467 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1468 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1469 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1470 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1471 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1472 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1476 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1478 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1479 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1480 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1481 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1482 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1483 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1484 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1485 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1486 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1488 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1489 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1490 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1491 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1492 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1493 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1494 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1497 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1499 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1508 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1510 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1511 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1512 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1514 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1515 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1516 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1517 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1518 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1519 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1520 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1521 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1522 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1523 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1524 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1525 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1526 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1527 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1528 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1529 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1530 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1531 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1532 * values were filled.
1533 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1534 * support dB or unspecified units)
1535 * @antenna: antenna used
1536 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1537 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1538 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only)
1539 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1540 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1541 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1542 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1543 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1544 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1545 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1546 * @eht: EHT specific rate information
1547 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc
1548 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi
1549 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1550 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1551 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1552 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1553 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1554 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1555 * is set only when connection is MLO.
1556 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1559 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1563 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1565 u32 device_timestamp;
1566 u32 ampdu_reference;
1568 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1570 u8 encoding:3, bw:4;
1589 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1590 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1591 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1592 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1596 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1598 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1599 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1603 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1605 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1607 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1608 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1609 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1610 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1611 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1612 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1613 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1614 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1615 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1617 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1618 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1619 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1620 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1621 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1622 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1623 * operating channel.
1625 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1626 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1627 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1628 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1629 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1634 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1636 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1637 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1638 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1639 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1640 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1641 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1642 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1643 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1644 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1645 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1647 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1648 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1649 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1650 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1651 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1652 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1653 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1654 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1655 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1659 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1661 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1662 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1663 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1664 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1665 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1667 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1668 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1670 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1671 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1674 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1678 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1680 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1682 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1684 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1685 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1686 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1687 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1688 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1689 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1690 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1692 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1693 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1695 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1696 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1698 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1699 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1700 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1701 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1702 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1703 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1705 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1706 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1707 * configured for an HT channel.
1708 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1709 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1711 struct ieee80211_conf {
1713 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1715 u16 listen_interval;
1718 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1720 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1722 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1726 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1728 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1731 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1732 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1733 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1734 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1735 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1736 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1737 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1738 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1739 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1740 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1741 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1742 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1743 * channel, expressed in TU.
1745 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1747 u32 device_timestamp;
1749 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1755 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1757 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1758 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1759 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1760 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1761 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1762 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1763 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1764 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1765 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1766 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1767 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1768 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1769 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1770 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is
1771 * enabled for the interface.
1773 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1774 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1775 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1776 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1777 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1778 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4),
1783 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1785 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1786 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1787 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1788 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1789 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1790 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1794 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1795 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1796 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1797 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1801 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1802 * @assoc: association status
1803 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1804 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1805 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1806 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1807 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1808 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D2.2 Figure 9-1002k.
1809 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in
1810 * P802.11be_D2.2 Figure 9-1002j.
1811 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1812 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1813 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1814 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1815 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1816 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1817 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1818 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1819 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1820 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1821 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1822 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1823 * your driver/device needs to do.
1824 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1825 * (station mode only)
1827 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1828 /* association related data */
1829 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1834 u16 eml_med_sync_delay;
1836 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1838 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1842 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1846 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1848 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1849 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1851 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1852 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1853 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1854 * or the BSS we're associated to
1855 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1856 * indexed by link ID
1857 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1858 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1859 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1860 * API calls meant for that purpose.
1861 * @dormant_links: bitmap of valid but disabled links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1862 * Must be a subset of valid_links.
1863 * @addr: address of this interface
1864 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1865 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1866 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this
1867 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver
1868 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup
1869 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM)
1870 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1871 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1872 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1873 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1874 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1875 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1876 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1877 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1879 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1880 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1881 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1882 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1883 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1884 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1886 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1887 * for this interface.
1888 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1890 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue
1891 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1892 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1893 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1895 struct ieee80211_vif {
1896 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1897 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1898 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1899 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1900 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links;
1901 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1905 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1907 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1909 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
1913 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1914 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1918 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1920 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1923 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1927 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif
1928 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested
1929 * Return: the usable link bitmap
1931 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1933 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links;
1937 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one
1939 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise.
1941 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1943 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */
1944 return vif->valid_links != 0;
1947 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \
1948 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \
1949 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
1950 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
1951 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id)))
1953 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1955 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1956 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1962 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1963 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1965 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1966 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1968 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1969 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1970 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1972 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1975 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1976 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1978 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1979 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1980 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1982 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1984 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1986 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx);
1989 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \
1990 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
1991 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif))
1993 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \
1994 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
1995 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif))
1998 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
2000 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
2001 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
2003 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
2004 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
2005 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
2006 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
2007 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
2008 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
2009 * generation in software.
2010 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
2011 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
2012 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
2013 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
2014 * (MFP) to be done in software.
2015 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
2016 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
2017 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
2018 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
2019 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
2021 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
2022 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
2023 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
2024 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
2025 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
2026 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
2027 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
2028 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
2029 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
2030 * only for management frames (MFP).
2031 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
2032 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
2033 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
2034 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
2035 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
2036 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
2037 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
2038 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
2039 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
2042 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
2043 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
2044 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
2045 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
2046 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
2047 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
2048 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
2049 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
2050 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
2051 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
2052 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
2053 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
2057 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
2059 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
2060 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
2062 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
2063 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
2064 * encrypted in hardware.
2065 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
2066 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
2067 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
2068 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
2069 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
2070 * @keylen: key material length
2071 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
2073 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
2074 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
2075 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
2076 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
2077 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
2078 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
2080 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
2093 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
2095 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2096 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2099 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2101 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2102 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2103 * reverse order than in packet)
2104 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2105 * reverse order than in packet)
2106 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2107 * reverse order than in packet)
2108 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2109 * reverse order than in packet)
2110 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2112 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2131 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2138 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2140 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2141 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2143 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2144 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2147 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2151 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2153 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2154 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2155 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2156 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2157 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2158 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2160 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2161 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2162 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2165 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2166 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2170 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2171 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2172 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2173 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2174 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2175 * (including 80+80 MHz)
2176 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2178 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2179 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2181 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2182 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2183 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2184 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2185 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2186 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2190 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2192 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2193 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2194 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2196 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2197 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2204 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2208 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2210 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2212 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2214 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2215 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2216 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2217 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2220 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2222 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2226 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2228 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2229 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2231 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2232 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2233 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2235 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2236 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2237 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2238 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2240 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2241 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2243 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2244 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2246 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2249 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2250 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2254 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2255 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2256 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2258 * @sta: reference to owning STA
2259 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2260 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2261 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2262 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2263 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2264 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2265 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2266 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2267 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2268 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2269 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2270 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation
2271 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2272 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2273 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2274 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2275 * the station moves to associated state.
2276 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2279 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2280 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2284 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2286 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2287 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2288 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2289 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2290 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2291 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2293 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2296 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2297 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2301 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2303 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2304 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2305 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2306 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2307 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2308 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2309 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2310 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2312 * @addr: MAC address
2313 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2314 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2315 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2316 * Can be modified by driver.
2317 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2318 * otherwise always false)
2319 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2320 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2321 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2322 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2323 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2324 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2325 * @rates: rate control selection table
2326 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2327 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2328 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2329 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2330 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2331 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2332 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2334 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2335 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2336 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2337 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2338 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)
2339 * is used for non-data frames
2340 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2341 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2342 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2343 * the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2344 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2345 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2346 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2347 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2348 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2349 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2351 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2353 struct ieee80211_sta {
2356 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2360 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2362 bool tdls_initiator;
2365 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2367 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2369 bool support_p2p_ps;
2371 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2374 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2375 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2378 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2381 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2382 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2384 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2390 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \
2391 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \
2392 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2394 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \
2395 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \
2396 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2398 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \
2399 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \
2400 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
2401 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
2402 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id)))
2405 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2407 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2408 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2410 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2411 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2413 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2414 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2418 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2420 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2421 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2423 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2424 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2428 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2431 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2432 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2433 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2434 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2435 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2437 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2438 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2440 struct ieee80211_txq {
2441 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2442 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2447 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2451 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2453 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2454 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2455 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2456 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2457 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2459 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2460 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2461 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2462 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2463 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2465 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2466 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2467 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2468 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2469 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2472 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2473 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2474 * the FCS at the end.
2476 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2477 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2478 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2479 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2480 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2481 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2482 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2484 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2485 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2486 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2487 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2489 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2490 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2491 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2492 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2494 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2495 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2496 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2498 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2499 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2501 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2502 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2505 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2506 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2508 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2509 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2511 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2512 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2514 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2515 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2518 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2519 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2520 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2522 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2523 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2526 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2527 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2528 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2529 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2530 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2531 * only in that case.
2533 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2534 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2535 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2536 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2537 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2538 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2540 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2541 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2544 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2545 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2546 * active interfaces.
2548 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2549 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2550 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2552 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2553 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2554 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2555 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2556 * supported cipher suites.
2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2559 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2562 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2563 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2564 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2565 * control for more details.
2567 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2568 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2570 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2571 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2574 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2575 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2577 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2578 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2579 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2581 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2582 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2583 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2587 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2589 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2590 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2592 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2593 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2595 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2598 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2601 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2602 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2603 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2604 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2606 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2607 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2608 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2611 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2612 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2614 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2615 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2616 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2617 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2618 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2620 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2621 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2623 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2624 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2625 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2626 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2628 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2629 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2630 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2632 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2635 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2636 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2637 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2638 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2639 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2640 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2641 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2643 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2644 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2646 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2647 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2649 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2650 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2651 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2652 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2653 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2655 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2656 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2657 * TXQs to start with.
2659 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2660 * length in tx status information
2662 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2664 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2665 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2667 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2668 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2669 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2671 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2674 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2677 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2678 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2679 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2680 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2683 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2684 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2686 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2687 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2689 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2691 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2692 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2693 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2694 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2695 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2696 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2697 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2698 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2699 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2700 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2701 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2702 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2703 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2704 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2705 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2706 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2707 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2708 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2709 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2710 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2711 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2712 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2713 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2714 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2715 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2716 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2717 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2718 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2719 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2720 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2721 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2722 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2723 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2724 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2725 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2726 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2727 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2728 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2729 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2730 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2731 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2732 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2733 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2734 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2735 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2736 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2737 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2738 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2739 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2740 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2741 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2742 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2743 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2744 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2745 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2747 /* keep last, obviously */
2748 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2752 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2754 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2755 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2757 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2758 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2759 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2760 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2761 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2763 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2765 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2766 * along with this structure.
2768 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2770 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2771 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2773 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2774 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2776 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2777 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2779 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2782 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2783 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2784 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2786 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2787 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2788 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2790 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2791 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2792 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2793 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2794 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2795 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2796 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2797 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2799 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2801 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2802 * the hw can report back.
2803 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2805 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2806 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2808 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2809 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2810 * it shouldn't be set.
2812 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2813 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2814 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2815 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2816 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2817 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2819 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2820 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2822 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2823 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2825 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2826 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2827 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2828 * adding _BW is supported today.
2830 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2831 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2832 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2834 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2836 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2837 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2838 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2840 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2841 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2842 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2843 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2844 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2846 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2847 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2848 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2850 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2851 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2852 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2853 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2854 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2857 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2858 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2859 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2861 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2864 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2865 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2866 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2868 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2869 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2871 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2873 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2874 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2875 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2877 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2879 struct ieee80211_hw {
2880 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2881 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2882 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2884 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2885 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2886 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2889 int chanctx_data_size;
2892 u16 max_listen_interval;
2895 u8 max_report_rates;
2897 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2898 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2899 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2900 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2901 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2902 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2906 } radiotap_timestamp;
2907 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2909 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2910 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2911 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2912 u8 weight_multiplier;
2914 const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2915 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2918 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2919 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2921 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2923 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2925 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2926 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2928 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2930 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2933 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2935 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2936 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2938 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2939 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2942 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2946 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2948 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2949 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2950 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2951 * @status: channel-switch response status
2952 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2953 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2954 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2955 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2956 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2958 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2959 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2960 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2966 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2971 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2973 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2975 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2976 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2977 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2978 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2979 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2981 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2983 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2986 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2988 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2989 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2991 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2993 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2997 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2999 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
3000 * @addr: the address to set
3002 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
3004 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
3007 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3008 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3009 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
3011 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
3013 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
3016 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3017 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3018 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
3020 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
3022 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
3025 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3026 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3027 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
3029 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
3031 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
3035 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
3039 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
3040 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
3042 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
3045 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
3047 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
3048 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
3050 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
3051 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
3052 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
3053 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
3054 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
3055 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
3056 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
3058 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
3059 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
3060 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
3062 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
3063 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
3064 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
3065 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range.
3067 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
3068 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
3069 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
3070 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
3072 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
3074 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
3075 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any
3076 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
3077 * based on the receive flags.
3079 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
3080 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
3081 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
3084 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
3085 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
3087 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
3088 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
3089 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
3090 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3091 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3092 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3094 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3095 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3096 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3098 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3099 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3101 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3102 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3103 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3104 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3105 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3106 encrypted with the new key when also needing
3107 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3108 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3109 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3113 * DOC: Powersave support
3115 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3117 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself;
3118 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3119 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3120 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3121 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3122 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3123 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3124 * it finds traffic directed to it.
3126 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3127 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3128 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3129 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3130 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3132 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3133 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3134 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3136 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3137 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3138 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3139 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3140 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3141 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3142 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3144 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3145 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3146 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3147 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when
3148 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3151 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3152 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3153 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3154 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3155 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3156 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3157 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3158 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3159 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3160 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3162 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3163 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3164 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3165 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3166 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3167 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3169 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3170 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3174 * DOC: Beacon filter support
3176 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3177 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3178 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3179 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3180 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3181 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3182 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3184 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3185 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3186 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3187 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3188 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3190 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3191 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3192 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3193 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3195 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3196 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3197 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3198 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3200 * - a list of information element IDs
3201 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3203 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3204 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3205 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3206 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3207 * vendor information elements.
3209 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3210 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3212 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing
3213 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3214 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3215 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3216 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3217 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3220 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3221 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3222 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3223 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when
3224 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3225 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3226 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3227 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3229 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3230 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3231 * signal strength threshold checking.
3235 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3237 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3238 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3239 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3240 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3242 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3243 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3244 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3245 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3246 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3249 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3250 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3251 * turned off otherwise.
3253 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3254 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3255 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3256 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3260 * DOC: Frame filtering
3262 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3263 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3264 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3265 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3266 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3268 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3269 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3270 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3272 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3273 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3274 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3275 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3276 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3277 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3278 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3280 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3281 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3282 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3285 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3286 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3287 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3288 * the flag, but not clear it.
3289 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3290 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3291 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3292 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3293 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3294 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3295 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3296 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3300 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3302 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3303 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3304 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3306 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3307 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3308 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3309 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3312 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3313 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3314 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3315 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3316 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3317 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3318 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3320 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3321 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3322 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3323 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3324 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3325 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3326 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3327 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3328 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3329 * @sta_notify callback.
3331 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3332 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3333 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3334 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3335 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3336 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3337 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3338 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3339 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3340 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3341 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3342 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3343 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3344 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3346 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3347 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3349 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3350 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3351 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3352 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3353 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3354 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3355 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3356 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3357 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3358 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3359 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3361 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3362 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3363 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3364 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3365 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3366 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3367 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3368 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3369 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3370 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames.
3371 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3372 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3373 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3374 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3376 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3377 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3378 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3379 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3380 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3381 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3382 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3384 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3385 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3386 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3387 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3388 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3390 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3391 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3392 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3393 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3397 * DOC: HW queue control
3399 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3400 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3401 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3402 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3403 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3404 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3406 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3407 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3408 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3410 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3411 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3412 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3413 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3414 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3415 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3416 * the hardware queue.
3417 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3418 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3420 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual
3421 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3422 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3423 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3424 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3426 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3427 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3428 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3429 * off-channel queue: 9
3431 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3432 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3434 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3435 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3436 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3437 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3438 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3439 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3440 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3442 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3443 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3445 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3446 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3447 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3448 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3452 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3454 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3455 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3456 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3457 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3459 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3460 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3461 * multicast address.
3463 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3464 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3466 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3467 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3469 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3470 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3471 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3472 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3473 * honour this flag if possible.
3475 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3478 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3480 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3482 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3484 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3486 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3487 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3489 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3490 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3492 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3494 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3495 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3499 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3501 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3502 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3504 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3505 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3506 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3507 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3509 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3510 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3511 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3512 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3513 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3514 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3515 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3516 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3517 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3518 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3519 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3520 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3521 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3522 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3523 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3524 * session is gone and removes the station.
3525 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3526 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3527 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3528 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3530 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3531 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3532 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3533 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3534 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3535 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3536 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3537 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3540 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3541 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3544 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3546 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3547 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3548 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3549 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3550 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3551 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3552 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3553 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3554 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3555 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3556 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3557 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3558 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3560 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3561 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3562 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3571 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3572 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3573 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3574 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3576 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3577 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3578 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3582 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3584 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3585 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3586 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3587 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3588 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3589 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3590 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3592 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3595 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3596 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3597 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3598 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3599 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3603 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3605 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3606 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3607 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3608 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3609 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3611 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3612 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3613 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3615 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3616 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3617 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3621 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3623 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3624 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3626 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3627 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3628 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3629 * of wowlan configuration)
3631 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3632 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3633 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3637 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3638 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3639 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3640 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3641 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3642 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3643 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3644 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed.
3645 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3647 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3655 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3657 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3658 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3659 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3661 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3662 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3663 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3664 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3665 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3668 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3669 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3670 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3671 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3673 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3674 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3676 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3678 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3679 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3680 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3681 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3682 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3683 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3684 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3686 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3687 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3688 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3689 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3690 * reconfigured at resume time.
3691 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3692 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3693 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3694 * must return 1 from this function.
3696 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3697 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3698 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3699 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3700 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3702 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3703 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3704 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3707 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3708 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3709 * and @stop must be implemented.
3710 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3711 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3712 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3713 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3714 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3715 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3717 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3718 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3719 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3720 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3721 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3723 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3724 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3725 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3726 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3727 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3728 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3729 * MAC address of the device going away.
3730 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3732 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3733 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3734 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3735 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3737 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3738 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3739 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3740 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3741 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3742 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3744 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3745 * are not implemented.
3747 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3748 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3749 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3750 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3751 * The callback can sleep.
3753 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3754 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3755 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3756 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3757 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3758 * non-MLO connections.
3759 * The callback can sleep.
3761 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3762 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3763 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3765 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3766 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3767 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3769 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3770 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3771 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3772 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3773 * which flags are changed.
3774 * This callback can sleep.
3776 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3777 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3779 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3780 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3781 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3783 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3784 * The callback can sleep.
3786 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3787 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3788 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3789 * The callback must be atomic.
3791 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3792 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3793 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3794 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3795 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3797 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3798 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3799 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3801 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3802 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3803 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3804 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3805 * that power save is disabled.
3806 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3807 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3808 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3809 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3810 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3811 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3812 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3813 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3814 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3815 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3816 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3817 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3818 * The callback can sleep.
3820 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3821 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3822 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3823 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3824 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3825 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3826 * The callback can sleep.
3828 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3829 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3830 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3831 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3833 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3834 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3836 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3837 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3838 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3839 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3840 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3842 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3843 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3844 * this notification.
3845 * The callback can sleep.
3847 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3848 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3849 * The callback can sleep.
3851 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3852 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3853 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3854 * The callback must be atomic.
3856 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3857 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3858 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3859 * should be set as well.
3860 * The callback can sleep.
3862 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3863 * The callback can sleep.
3865 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3866 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3868 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3869 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3870 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3871 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3872 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3873 * This callback can sleep.
3875 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif
3876 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a
3877 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep.
3879 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3880 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within
3881 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep.
3882 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf
3883 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory.
3885 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3886 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3887 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3888 * callback can sleep.
3890 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3891 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback
3892 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3893 * callback can sleep.
3894 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the
3895 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory.
3897 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3898 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3899 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3900 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3902 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3903 * power for the station.
3904 * This callback can sleep.
3906 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3907 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3908 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3909 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3910 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3911 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3912 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3913 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3914 * The callback can sleep.
3916 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3917 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3918 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3919 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3921 * The callback can sleep.
3923 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3924 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3925 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3926 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3927 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3928 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3930 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3931 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3932 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3934 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3935 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3936 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3937 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3938 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3939 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3940 * The callback can sleep.
3942 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3943 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3944 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3945 * The callback can sleep.
3947 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3948 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3949 * required function.
3950 * The callback can sleep.
3952 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3953 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3954 * required function.
3955 * The callback can sleep.
3957 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3958 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3959 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3960 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3961 * The callback can sleep.
3963 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3964 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3965 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3966 * TSF synchronization.
3967 * The callback can sleep.
3969 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3970 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3971 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3972 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3973 * The callback can sleep.
3975 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3977 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3978 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3979 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3980 * The callback can sleep.
3982 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3983 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3984 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3985 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3986 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3988 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3989 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3990 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3992 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3993 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3994 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3995 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3996 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3997 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3998 * The callback can sleep.
4000 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for
4001 * the given station, as it's about to be removed.
4002 * The callback can sleep.
4004 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
4005 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
4006 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
4007 * completion of the channel switch.
4009 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
4010 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
4011 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
4012 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
4014 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
4016 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
4017 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
4018 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
4019 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
4020 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
4021 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
4022 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
4023 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
4024 * must be accepted in this case.
4025 * This callback may sleep.
4026 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
4027 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
4029 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
4031 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
4033 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
4034 * queues before entering power save.
4036 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
4037 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
4038 * The callback can sleep.
4039 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
4040 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
4041 * The callback must be atomic.
4043 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
4044 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
4045 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
4046 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
4047 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
4048 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
4049 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
4050 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
4051 * more-data bit must always be set.
4052 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
4053 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
4054 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
4055 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
4056 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
4057 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
4058 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
4059 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
4060 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
4061 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
4062 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
4063 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
4064 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
4065 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
4066 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
4067 * This callback must be atomic.
4068 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
4069 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
4070 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
4071 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
4072 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
4073 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
4074 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
4075 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
4076 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
4077 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
4078 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
4079 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
4080 * This callback must be atomic.
4082 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
4083 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's
4084 * expected to return a static value.
4086 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
4088 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
4089 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
4090 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's
4091 * expected to return a static value.
4093 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
4094 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
4095 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
4096 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
4097 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
4098 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
4099 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
4100 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
4101 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
4102 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
4103 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
4104 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
4105 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
4106 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
4107 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
4108 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
4109 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
4110 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
4111 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
4112 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
4113 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
4115 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
4116 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
4117 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
4118 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4119 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4120 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4121 * 2 * (DTIM period).
4122 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
4124 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4125 * This callback may sleep.
4126 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4127 * This callback may sleep.
4128 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4129 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4130 * channel context with different settings
4131 * This callback may sleep.
4132 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4133 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4134 * This callback may sleep.
4135 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4137 * This callback may sleep.
4138 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4139 * another, as specified in the list of
4140 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4141 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4142 * This callback may sleep.
4144 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4145 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4146 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4147 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4148 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4149 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4150 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4152 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4153 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4154 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4155 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4156 * This callback may sleep.
4158 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4159 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4160 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4162 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4163 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4164 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4165 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4166 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4167 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4168 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4169 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4170 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4171 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4172 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4173 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4174 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4175 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4176 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4177 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4178 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4179 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4180 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4181 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4182 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4183 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4184 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4185 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4186 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4187 * channel context is bound before this is called.
4188 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4190 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4191 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4192 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4194 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4195 * and hardware limits.
4197 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4198 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4199 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4200 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4201 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4202 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4203 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4204 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4205 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4206 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4207 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4208 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4209 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4210 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
4211 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4212 * the function call.
4214 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4215 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4216 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4217 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4218 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4220 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4221 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4222 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4223 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4224 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4225 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4226 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4227 * changed parameters.
4228 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4229 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4231 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4232 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4233 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4234 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4235 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4236 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4237 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4238 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4239 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4241 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4242 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4243 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4244 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4245 * This callback may sleep.
4246 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4247 * This callback may sleep.
4248 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4250 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4251 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4252 * to use rx decapsulation offload
4253 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4254 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4255 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4256 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4258 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4260 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4261 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4262 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4263 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4264 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4266 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4267 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
4268 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4269 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4270 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4271 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4272 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4273 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4274 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4275 * that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4276 * This callback can sleep.
4277 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4278 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4279 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4280 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4281 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4282 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is
4283 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of
4285 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware
4286 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif.
4287 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid
4288 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown.
4290 struct ieee80211_ops {
4291 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4292 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4293 struct sk_buff *skb);
4294 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4295 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4297 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4298 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4299 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4301 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4303 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4304 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4305 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4306 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4308 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4309 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4310 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4311 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4313 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4316 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4318 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4321 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4322 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4323 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4324 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4326 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4327 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4328 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4329 unsigned int changed_flags,
4330 unsigned int *total_flags,
4332 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4334 unsigned int filter_flags,
4335 unsigned int changed_flags);
4336 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4338 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4339 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4340 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4341 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4343 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4345 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4346 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4348 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4349 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4351 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4352 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4353 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4354 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4355 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4357 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4358 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4359 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4361 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4362 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4363 const u8 *mac_addr);
4364 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4365 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4366 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4368 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4369 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4370 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4371 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4372 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4373 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4374 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4375 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4376 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4377 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4378 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4379 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4380 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4381 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4382 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4383 struct dentry *dir);
4384 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4385 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4386 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4387 struct dentry *dir);
4388 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4389 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4390 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta,
4391 struct dentry *dir);
4393 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4394 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4395 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4396 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4397 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4398 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4399 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4400 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4401 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4402 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4404 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4405 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4407 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4409 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4411 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4412 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4414 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4415 struct station_info *sinfo);
4416 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4417 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4418 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4419 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4420 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4421 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4423 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4425 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4426 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4430 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4431 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4432 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4433 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4434 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4435 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4436 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4437 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4438 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4441 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4444 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4445 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4451 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4453 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4454 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4455 * if the session can start immediately.
4457 * The callback can sleep.
4459 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4461 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4462 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4463 struct survey_info *survey);
4464 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4465 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4466 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4467 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4468 void *data, int len);
4469 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4470 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4471 void *data, int len);
4473 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4474 u32 queues, bool drop);
4475 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4476 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4477 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4479 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4480 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4481 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4483 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4485 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4487 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4488 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4490 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4491 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4492 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4493 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4494 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4495 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4496 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4498 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4500 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4501 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4502 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4503 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4505 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4507 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4508 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4511 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4513 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4514 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4515 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4516 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4518 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4520 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4522 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4523 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4525 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4527 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4529 unsigned int link_id);
4531 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4532 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4533 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4534 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4535 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4536 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4538 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4540 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4541 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4542 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4544 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4545 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4546 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4547 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4549 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4551 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4552 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4554 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4555 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4556 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4557 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4559 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4561 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4562 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4564 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4566 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4567 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4568 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4569 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4571 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4572 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4573 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4575 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4576 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4577 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4578 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4579 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4582 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4583 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4584 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4585 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4586 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4587 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4590 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4592 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4594 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4595 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4596 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4598 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4600 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4601 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4602 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4603 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4605 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4606 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4608 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4609 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4610 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4612 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4613 struct sk_buff *head,
4614 struct sk_buff *skb);
4615 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4617 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4618 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4619 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4620 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4621 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4622 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4624 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4625 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4626 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4628 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4629 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4631 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4632 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4633 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4634 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4635 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4636 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4637 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4638 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4640 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4641 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4642 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4643 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4644 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4645 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4647 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4648 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4649 struct net_device_path *path);
4650 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4651 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4652 u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4653 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4654 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4657 u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4658 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4659 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4660 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts);
4661 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4663 struct net_device *dev,
4664 enum tc_setup_type type,
4669 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4671 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4672 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4673 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4674 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4677 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4678 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4679 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4680 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4682 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4684 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4685 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4686 const char *requested_name);
4689 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4691 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4692 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4693 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4694 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4697 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4698 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4700 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4703 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4704 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4706 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4710 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4712 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4713 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4714 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4716 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4718 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4720 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4723 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4724 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4725 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4726 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4728 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4734 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4735 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4736 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4737 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4738 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4740 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4741 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4742 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4743 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4746 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4747 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4748 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4749 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4750 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4752 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4754 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4755 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4758 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4760 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4761 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4762 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4763 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4765 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4767 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4769 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4771 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4772 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4779 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4781 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4782 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4783 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4784 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4786 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4788 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4790 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4792 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4793 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4800 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4802 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4803 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4804 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4805 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4807 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4809 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4811 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4813 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4814 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4821 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4823 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4824 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4825 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4826 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4828 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4830 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4832 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4834 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4835 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4842 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4843 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4844 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4845 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4846 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4848 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4849 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4851 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4853 static inline const char *
4854 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4855 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4856 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4858 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4859 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4867 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4869 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4870 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4872 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4874 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4877 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4879 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4880 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4881 * before calling this function.
4883 * @hw: the hardware to free
4885 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4888 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4890 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4891 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4892 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4893 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4894 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4895 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4897 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4899 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4902 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4904 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4905 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4906 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4907 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4908 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4910 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4911 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4912 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4913 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4914 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4916 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4918 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4919 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4920 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4921 * @list: the destination list
4923 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4924 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4927 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4929 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4930 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4931 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4932 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4933 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4935 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4936 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4937 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4938 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4939 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4941 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4943 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4944 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4945 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4946 * @napi: the NAPI context
4948 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4949 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4952 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4954 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4955 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4956 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4957 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4958 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4960 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4961 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4962 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4963 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4964 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4966 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4968 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4969 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4971 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4973 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4977 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4979 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4980 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4982 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4983 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4984 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4986 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4987 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4989 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4992 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4994 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4995 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4997 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4998 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4999 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5001 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5002 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5004 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5005 struct sk_buff *skb)
5008 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
5013 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
5015 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
5016 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
5017 * entering/leaving PS mode.
5019 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
5021 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
5024 * @sta: currently connected sta
5025 * @start: start or stop PS
5027 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
5029 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
5032 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
5033 * (in process context)
5035 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
5036 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
5039 * @sta: currently connected sta
5040 * @start: start or stop PS
5042 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
5044 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5050 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
5057 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
5058 * @sta: currently connected station
5060 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
5061 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
5062 * connected station was received.
5063 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
5064 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
5067 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
5070 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
5071 * @sta: currently connected station
5072 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
5074 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
5075 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
5076 * from a connected station was received.
5077 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
5078 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
5080 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
5081 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
5082 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
5085 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5088 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
5089 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
5091 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
5094 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
5095 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
5096 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
5097 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
5099 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
5100 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
5101 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
5103 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
5104 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
5105 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
5106 * call! Beware of the locking!)
5108 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
5109 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
5110 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
5111 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
5112 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
5113 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
5115 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
5116 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
5117 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
5118 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
5121 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5122 u8 tid, bool buffered);
5125 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
5127 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
5128 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
5129 * rate selection table for the station entry.
5131 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5132 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
5133 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
5134 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
5135 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
5137 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5138 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5139 struct sk_buff *skb,
5140 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
5144 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
5146 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
5147 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5148 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5149 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5150 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5151 * slow stations to starve).
5153 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5154 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5156 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5160 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5162 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5163 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5164 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5166 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5167 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5168 * @info: tx status information
5170 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5171 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5172 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5175 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback
5177 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5178 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5179 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5181 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5182 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5183 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5184 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5185 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5187 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5188 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5190 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5191 struct sk_buff *skb);
5194 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5196 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb()
5197 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5198 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5200 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5201 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5202 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5204 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5205 * @status: tx status information
5207 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5208 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5211 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5213 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb()
5214 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5217 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5218 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5219 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5221 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5222 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5223 * (NULL for multicast packets)
5224 * @info: tx status information
5226 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5227 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5228 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5230 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5235 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5239 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5241 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context.
5243 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and
5244 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5245 * for a single hardware.
5247 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5248 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5250 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5251 struct sk_buff *skb)
5254 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb);
5259 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5261 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context
5262 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5264 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and
5265 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5267 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5268 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5270 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5271 struct sk_buff *skb);
5274 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5276 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5279 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5280 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5282 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5284 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5287 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5288 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5289 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5290 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5291 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
5292 * should be ignored.
5293 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5295 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5299 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5304 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5305 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5306 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5307 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5308 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5309 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5310 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5312 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5313 * obtain the beacon template.
5315 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5316 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5317 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5318 * applicable, the CSA count.
5320 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5322 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5325 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5327 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5328 unsigned int link_id);
5331 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation
5332 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5333 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5334 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5335 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5336 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP).
5337 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set.
5339 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template()
5340 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the
5343 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates.
5346 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5348 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5349 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index);
5352 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons
5353 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons.
5355 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons.
5356 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon
5357 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5358 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5360 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons {
5363 struct sk_buff *skb;
5364 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs;
5369 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation
5370 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5371 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5372 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5374 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template()
5375 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required
5376 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only
5377 * one multiple BSSID element.
5379 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory.
5381 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *.
5384 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *
5385 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5387 unsigned int link_id);
5390 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list
5391 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers.
5393 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling
5394 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list()
5396 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons);
5399 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5400 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5402 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5403 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5404 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5405 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
5406 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5407 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5408 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5410 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5411 * obtain the beacon frame.
5413 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5414 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5415 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5416 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5418 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5420 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5422 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5423 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5424 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5425 unsigned int link_id);
5428 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5429 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5431 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5432 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5434 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5436 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5438 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5440 unsigned int link_id)
5442 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5446 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5447 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5449 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5450 * This function is called implicitly when
5451 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5452 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5453 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5455 * Return: new countdown value
5457 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5460 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5461 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5462 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5464 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5465 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5467 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5468 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5470 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5473 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5474 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5476 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5477 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5478 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5480 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5483 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5486 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5488 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5491 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5492 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5494 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5495 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5496 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5498 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5501 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5502 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5503 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5505 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5506 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5508 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5510 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5512 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5516 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5517 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5518 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5520 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5521 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5522 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5524 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5525 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5527 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5529 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5533 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5534 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5535 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5536 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5537 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5538 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5539 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5540 * if at all possible
5542 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5543 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5544 * BSSID and address is used.
5546 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5547 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5549 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5550 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5552 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5554 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5556 int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5559 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5560 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5561 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5562 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5563 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5564 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5566 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5569 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5571 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5573 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5577 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5578 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5579 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5580 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5581 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5582 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5583 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5585 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5586 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5587 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5588 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5590 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5591 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5592 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5593 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5596 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5597 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5598 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5599 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5600 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5602 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5603 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5604 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5606 * Return: The duration.
5608 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5610 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5613 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5614 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5615 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5616 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5617 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5618 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5619 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5621 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5622 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5623 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5624 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5626 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5628 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5629 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5630 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5633 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5634 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5635 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5636 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5637 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5639 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5640 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5641 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5643 * Return: The duration.
5645 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5648 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5651 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5652 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5654 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5655 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5656 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5658 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5659 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5661 * Return: The duration.
5663 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5664 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5665 enum nl80211_band band,
5667 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5670 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5671 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5672 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5674 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5675 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5676 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5677 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5678 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5680 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5681 * frames are available.
5683 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5684 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5685 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5686 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5687 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5688 * use common code for all beacons.
5691 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5694 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5696 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5698 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5699 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5700 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5702 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5703 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5706 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5708 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5709 * from the given packet.
5711 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5712 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5714 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5716 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5717 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5719 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5720 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5721 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5723 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5727 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5729 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5730 * and transmitter address.
5732 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5733 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5734 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5735 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5737 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5738 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5741 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5743 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5746 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5747 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5748 * encrypted with this key
5749 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5751 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5752 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5755 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5757 * @pos: start of crypto header
5758 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5761 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5762 * the packet payload)
5764 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5765 * point to the crypto header)
5767 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5770 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5772 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5773 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5774 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5775 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5776 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5778 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5779 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5780 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5782 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5783 * can be done concurrently.
5785 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5786 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5789 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5791 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5792 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5793 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5794 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5795 * @seq: new sequence data
5797 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5798 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5799 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5800 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5802 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5803 * can be done concurrently.
5805 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5806 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5809 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5810 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5812 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5813 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5814 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5816 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5817 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5819 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5822 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5823 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5824 * @keyconf: new key data
5826 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5827 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5828 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5830 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5831 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5832 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5833 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5835 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5836 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5837 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5838 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5839 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5840 * of the reconfiguration.
5842 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5843 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5845 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5846 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5847 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5848 * the key that's being replaced.
5850 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5851 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5852 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5855 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5856 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5857 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5858 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5859 * @gfp: allocation flags
5861 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5862 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5865 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5867 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5870 * @keyconf: the key in question
5872 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5875 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5877 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5880 * @keyconf: the key in question
5882 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5885 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5886 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5887 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5889 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5891 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5894 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5895 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5896 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5898 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5900 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5903 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5904 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5905 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5907 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped.
5909 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5912 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5915 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5916 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5918 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues.
5920 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5923 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5924 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5926 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues.
5928 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5931 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5933 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5934 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5935 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5936 * any context, including hardirq context.
5938 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5939 * @info: information about the completed scan
5941 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5942 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5945 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5947 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5948 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5950 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5952 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5955 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5957 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5958 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5959 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5960 * while associating, for instance.
5962 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5964 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5967 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5968 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5969 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5970 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5971 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5972 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5973 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5974 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5975 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5976 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5977 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5980 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5981 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5982 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5983 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5984 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5988 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5990 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5991 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5992 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5993 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5995 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5996 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5997 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5998 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6000 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
6001 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
6002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6006 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
6008 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6009 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6010 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
6011 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
6013 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
6015 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6016 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6017 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
6018 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6021 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
6022 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
6023 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6026 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
6027 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
6032 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
6034 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6035 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6036 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
6037 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
6038 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
6040 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6041 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6042 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6043 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6045 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6047 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6053 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
6055 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6056 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6057 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
6059 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6060 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6061 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6062 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6064 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6066 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6072 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
6074 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
6075 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
6076 * function for them.
6077 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
6079 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6080 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6081 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6083 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6084 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6085 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
6088 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
6090 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
6091 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
6093 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
6094 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
6096 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
6099 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
6101 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
6104 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
6105 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
6106 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
6108 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6109 struct delayed_work *dwork,
6110 unsigned long delay);
6113 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer.
6114 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
6115 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6117 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer
6118 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the
6121 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section.
6123 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6127 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
6128 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
6129 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6130 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
6132 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
6134 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
6135 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
6136 * will be managed by the mac80211.
6138 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
6142 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
6143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6144 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6145 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6147 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6148 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
6151 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6155 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
6156 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
6157 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
6159 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
6161 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
6162 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
6163 * will be managed by the mac80211.
6165 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
6168 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
6169 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6170 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6171 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
6173 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6174 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
6175 * can be called from any context.
6177 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6181 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
6183 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
6184 * @addr: station's address
6186 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6188 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6189 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6191 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6195 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6197 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6198 * @addr: remote station's address
6199 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6201 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6203 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6204 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6206 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6207 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6208 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6209 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6210 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6211 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6214 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6216 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6218 const u8 *localaddr);
6221 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6222 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6223 * @addr: remote station's link address
6224 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6225 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6226 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6228 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6230 struct ieee80211_sta *
6231 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6233 const u8 *localaddr,
6234 unsigned int *link_id);
6237 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6239 * @pubsta: the station
6240 * @block: whether to block or unblock
6242 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6243 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6244 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6245 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6246 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6248 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6251 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6252 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6253 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6254 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6255 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6256 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6257 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6258 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6259 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6260 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6261 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6262 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6263 * woke up while blocked or not.
6265 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6266 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6269 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6270 * @pubsta: the station
6272 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6273 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6274 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6275 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6277 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6278 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6279 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6280 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6282 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6283 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6284 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6285 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
6287 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6290 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6291 * @pubsta: the station
6292 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6294 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6295 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6296 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6297 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6298 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6299 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6300 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6301 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6302 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6303 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6304 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6305 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6306 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6307 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6309 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6312 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6313 * @pubsta: the station
6315 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6316 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6317 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6319 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6320 * there is no need to call this function.
6322 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6325 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6327 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6328 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6329 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6330 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6332 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6333 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6334 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6335 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6336 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6339 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6340 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6341 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6344 * @pubsta: the station
6345 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6346 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6347 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6349 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6350 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6353 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6355 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6356 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6358 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6359 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6362 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6365 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6366 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6367 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6368 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6369 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6371 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6372 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6373 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6374 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6375 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6376 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6378 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6379 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6382 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6384 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6385 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6386 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6387 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6392 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6393 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6394 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6395 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6396 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6398 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6399 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6400 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6401 * in removal process will be skipped.
6403 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6404 * and thus iter must be atomic.
6406 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6408 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6409 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6410 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6411 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6416 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6417 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6418 * @iter: iterator function
6419 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6421 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6422 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6423 * places while calling into the driver.
6425 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6426 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6429 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6430 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6431 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6434 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6435 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6436 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6437 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6442 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6443 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6444 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6446 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6447 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6448 * information. This function must only be called from within the
6449 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6450 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6453 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6455 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6459 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6461 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6463 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6464 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6465 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6467 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6470 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6472 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6474 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6475 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6476 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6477 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6478 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6480 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6481 * without connection recovery attempts.
6483 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6486 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6488 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6489 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6491 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6492 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6494 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6497 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6501 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6502 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6503 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6504 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6505 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6507 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6508 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6509 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6510 * disconnect normally later.
6512 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6513 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6514 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6515 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6517 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6520 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6524 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6527 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6530 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6531 * rssi threshold triggered
6533 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6534 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6535 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6536 * @gfp: context flags
6538 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6539 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6540 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6542 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6543 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6548 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6550 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6551 * @gfp: context flags
6553 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6556 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6558 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6560 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6563 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6564 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6565 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6566 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is
6569 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6570 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6572 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success,
6573 unsigned int link_id);
6576 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6577 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6578 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6580 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6581 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6582 * a deauth frame in this case.
6584 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6588 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6589 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6590 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6591 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6593 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6594 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6595 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6597 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6598 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6601 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6602 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6604 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6607 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6608 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6610 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6613 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6615 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6616 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6617 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6618 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6619 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6620 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6622 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6623 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6624 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6626 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6630 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6631 * @pubsta: station struct
6632 * @tid: the session's TID
6633 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6634 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6635 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6636 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6638 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6639 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6640 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6641 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6642 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames)
6644 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6645 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6646 u16 received_mpdus);
6649 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6651 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6654 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6655 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6656 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6657 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6659 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6662 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6663 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6664 * @addr: station mac address
6667 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6671 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6673 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6674 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6677 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6678 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6681 * @addr: station mac address
6684 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6685 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6687 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6689 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6693 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6695 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6696 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6699 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6700 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6702 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6703 * @addr: station mac address
6706 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6707 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6709 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6711 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6715 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6717 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6718 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6720 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6722 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6723 * @addr: station mac address
6726 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6727 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6729 /* Rate control API */
6732 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6734 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6735 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6736 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6737 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6739 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6740 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6741 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6742 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6744 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6745 * if the selected rate supports it
6746 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6747 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6748 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6750 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6751 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6752 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6753 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6754 struct sk_buff *skb;
6755 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6756 bool rts, short_preamble;
6758 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6763 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6765 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6767 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6768 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6769 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6770 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6771 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6773 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6775 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6776 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6778 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6781 struct rate_control_ops {
6784 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6785 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6786 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6787 void (*free)(void *priv);
6789 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6790 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6791 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6792 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6793 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6794 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6795 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6797 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6800 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6801 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6802 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6803 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6804 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6805 struct sk_buff *skb);
6806 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6807 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6809 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6810 struct dentry *dir);
6812 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6815 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6816 enum nl80211_band band,
6819 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6823 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6828 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6829 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6832 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6835 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6840 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6845 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6846 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6852 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6854 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6855 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6856 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6857 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6859 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6860 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6861 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6863 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6864 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6865 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6867 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6868 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6871 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6873 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6877 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6879 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6880 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6884 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6886 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6887 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6891 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6893 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6897 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6899 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6900 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6901 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6904 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6905 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6909 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6910 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6911 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6912 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6920 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6921 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6923 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6927 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif
6928 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on
6929 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
6931 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found
6933 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap *
6934 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6937 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
6941 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities
6942 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on
6943 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
6945 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities
6947 static inline __le16
6948 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6951 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
6955 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif
6956 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on
6957 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
6959 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found
6961 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap *
6962 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6965 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
6969 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6971 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6972 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6973 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6974 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6976 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6977 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6978 * matching GroupId management frame.
6979 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6981 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6982 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6984 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6986 int rssi_max_thold);
6988 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6991 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6993 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6995 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6997 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
7000 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7003 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
7004 * @vif: virtual interface
7005 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
7006 * @gfp: allocation flags
7008 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
7010 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7011 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
7015 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
7016 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7017 * @vif: virtual interface
7018 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
7019 * @band: the band to transmit on
7020 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
7022 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
7024 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
7026 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
7029 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
7030 * of injected frames.
7032 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
7033 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
7034 * of the skb before calling this function.
7036 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
7037 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
7039 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
7040 struct net_device *dev);
7043 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
7045 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
7046 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
7048 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
7052 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
7053 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
7055 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
7061 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
7066 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
7070 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
7073 * @data: NoA tracking data
7074 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
7076 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
7078 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
7079 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
7082 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
7084 * @data: NoA tracking data
7085 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
7087 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
7090 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
7091 * @vif: virtual interface
7092 * @peer: the peer's destination address
7093 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
7094 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
7095 * @gfp: allocation flags
7097 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
7099 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
7100 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
7101 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
7104 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
7106 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
7107 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
7108 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
7109 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
7110 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
7111 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
7113 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
7114 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
7115 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
7117 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
7118 * @tid: the TID to reserve
7120 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
7122 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
7125 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
7127 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
7128 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
7129 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
7131 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
7132 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
7133 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
7136 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
7138 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
7141 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
7143 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7144 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
7145 * ieee80211_next_txq()
7147 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
7149 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
7150 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
7151 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
7152 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
7153 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
7154 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
7155 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
7157 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
7158 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
7160 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7161 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7164 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
7165 * (in process context)
7167 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
7168 * (internally disables bottom halves).
7170 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7171 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
7172 * ieee80211_next_txq()
7174 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7175 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7177 struct sk_buff *skb;
7180 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
7187 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback
7189 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback().
7190 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback().
7192 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue
7193 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function.
7195 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7196 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7199 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
7201 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7202 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
7204 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
7205 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
7206 * driver has finished scheduling it.
7208 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
7211 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
7213 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7214 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
7216 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
7217 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
7219 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
7222 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
7226 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7227 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
7230 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
7232 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7233 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7235 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
7236 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
7238 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
7239 * this TXQ internally.
7242 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7244 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
7248 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
7250 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7251 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7252 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7254 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7258 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7261 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7265 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7267 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7268 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7269 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by
7272 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7273 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7274 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7275 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7278 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7279 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7280 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7281 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7282 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7283 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7285 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7286 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7288 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7289 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7292 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7294 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7295 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7296 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7298 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7299 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7300 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7302 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7303 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7304 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7307 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7309 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7310 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7313 * @inst_id: the local instance id
7314 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7315 * @gfp: allocation flags
7317 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7319 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7323 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7325 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7326 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7327 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7329 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7330 * @match: match event information
7331 * @gfp: allocation flags
7333 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7334 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7338 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7340 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7341 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7343 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7344 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7346 * @len: frame length in bytes
7348 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7349 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7353 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7355 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7356 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7358 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7359 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7360 * @len: frame length in bytes
7362 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7363 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7366 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7368 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7369 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7370 * hardware or firmware.
7372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7373 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7375 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7378 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7379 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7380 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7382 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7384 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7386 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7390 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7391 * probe response template.
7392 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7393 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7395 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7397 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7400 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7401 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7404 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7407 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7408 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7410 * @gfp: allocation flags
7413 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7414 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7417 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7419 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7420 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7422 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7424 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7426 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7427 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7429 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7430 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7434 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7435 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7436 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7438 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7439 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7440 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7442 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7443 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7444 * a sequence of calls like
7445 * - change_vif_links(0x11)
7446 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7447 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7448 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7449 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7450 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7451 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7452 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7453 * - change_vif_links(0x10)
7455 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7456 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7457 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7459 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7462 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7463 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7464 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7466 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7467 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7468 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7469 * completed after it returns.
7471 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7474 #endif /* MAC80211_H */